2011-06-28 Tristan Gingold <gingold@adacore.com>
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1261command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1263input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1269libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1270the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1271DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With
1273@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1274of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1275library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1276symbols.
1277
252b5132
RH
1278@cindex cross reference table
1279@kindex --cref
1280@item --cref
1281Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1282generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1283Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1284
1285The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1286easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1287sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1288symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1289definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1290
4818e05f
AM
1291@cindex common allocation
1292@kindex --no-define-common
1293@item --no-define-common
1294This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1295The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1296@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1297
1298The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1299the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1300of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1301forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1302Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1303from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1304This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1305and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1306duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1307paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1308
252b5132 1309@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1310@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1311@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1312Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1313address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1314times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1315limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1316context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1317symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1318constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1319using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1320Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1321space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1322@var{expression}.
1323
1324@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1325@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1326@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1327@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx --no-demangle
1329These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1330and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1331present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1332underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1333mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1334different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1335to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1336demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1337is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1338
1339@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1340@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1341@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1342@item -I@var{file}
1343@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1344Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1345generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1346linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1347doing.
1348
7ce691ae 1349@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1350@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1351@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1352@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1353Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1354with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1355
252b5132
RH
1356@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1357@item --force-exe-suffix
1358Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1359
1360If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1361@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1362the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1363option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1364Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1365it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1366
1367@kindex --gc-sections
1368@kindex --no-gc-sections
1369@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1370@item --gc-sections
1371@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1372Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1373targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1374performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1375@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1376
d5465ba2
AM
1377@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1378examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1379symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1380command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1381referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1382libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1383referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1384the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1385relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1386
ac69cbc6 1387This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1388@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1389specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1390a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1391
c17d87de
NC
1392@kindex --print-gc-sections
1393@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1394@cindex garbage collection
1395@item --print-gc-sections
1396@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1397List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1398printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1399collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1400default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1401be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1402line.
1403
252b5132
RH
1404@cindex help
1405@cindex usage
1406@kindex --help
1407@item --help
1408Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1409
ea20a7da
CC
1410@kindex --target-help
1411@item --target-help
1412Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1413
2509a395
SL
1414@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1415@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1416Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1417@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1418
1419@cindex memory usage
1420@kindex --no-keep-memory
1421@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1422@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1423symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1424instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1425necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1426while linking a large executable.
1427
1428@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1429@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1430@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1431@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1432Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1433is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1434The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1435behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1436libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1437
aa713662
L
1438@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1439@kindex -z muldefs
1440@item --allow-multiple-definition
1441@itemx -z muldefs
1442Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1443report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1444first definition will be used.
1445
b79e8c78 1446@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1447@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1448@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1449@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1450Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1451This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1452determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1453shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1454how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1455
903249d7
NC
1456The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1457referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1458an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1459a shared library.
1460
1461The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1462libraries specified at link time are that:
1463
1464@itemize @bullet
1465@item
1466A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1467that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1468resolvable at load time.
1469@item
1470There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1471symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1472
1473The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1474select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1475architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1476appropriate memset function.
1477@end itemize
b79e8c78 1478
31941635
L
1479@kindex --no-undefined-version
1480@item --no-undefined-version
1481Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1482it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1483will be issued instead.
1484
3e3b46e5
PB
1485@kindex --default-symver
1486@item --default-symver
1487Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1488exported symbols.
1489
1490@kindex --default-imported-symver
1491@item --default-imported-symver
1492Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1493imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1494
252b5132
RH
1495@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1496@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1497Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1498files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1499been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1500This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1501errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1502have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1503inappropriate.
1504
fe7929ce
AM
1505@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1507Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1508library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1509
252b5132
RH
1510@kindex --no-whole-archive
1511@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1512Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1513archive files.
1514
1515@cindex output file after errors
1516@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1517@item --noinhibit-exec
1518Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1519Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1520errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1521when it issues any error whatsoever.
1522
0a9c1c8e
CD
1523@kindex -nostdlib
1524@item -nostdlib
1525Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1526command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1527(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1528
252b5132 1529@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1531@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1532@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1533file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1534@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1535object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1536object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1537should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1538usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1539name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1540list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1541command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1542this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1543@end ifclear
1544
36af4a4e
JJ
1545@kindex -pie
1546@kindex --pic-executable
1547@item -pie
1548@itemx --pic-executable
1549@cindex position independent executables
1550Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1551ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1552libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1553address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1554normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1555defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1556
252b5132
RH
1557@kindex -qmagic
1558@item -qmagic
1559This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1560
1561@kindex -Qy
1562@item -Qy
1563This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1564
1565@kindex --relax
1566@cindex synthesizing linker
1567@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1568@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1569@item --relax
28d5f677 1570@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1571An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1572@ifset GENERIC
1573This option is only supported on a few targets.
1574@end ifset
1575@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1576@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1577@end ifset
1578@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1579@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1580@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1581@ifset XTENSA
1582@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1583@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1584@ifset M68HC11
1585@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1586@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1587@ifset POWERPC
1588@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1589@end ifset
252b5132 1590
28d5f677
NC
1591On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1592global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1593addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1594synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1595instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1596
1597On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1598debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1599@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1600This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1601family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1602@end ifset
1603
1604@ifset GENERIC
1605On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1606but ignored.
1607@end ifset
1608
28d5f677
NC
1609On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1610@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1611
252b5132
RH
1612@cindex retaining specified symbols
1613@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1614@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1615@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1616@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1617Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1618discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1619symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1620@ifset GENERIC
1621(such as VxWorks)
1622@end ifset
1623where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1624run-time memory.
1625
1626@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1627or symbols needed for relocations.
1628
1629You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1630line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1631
1632@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1633@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1634@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1635@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1636Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1637linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1638arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1639them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1640also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1641objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1642@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1643ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1644@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1645
ff5dcc92 1646The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1647SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1648@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1649runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1650options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1651gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1652file systems.
252b5132 1653
ff5dcc92 1654For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1655followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1656the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1657@end ifset
1658
1659@ifset GENERIC
1660@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1661@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1662@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1663When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1664happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1665of the input files.
1666
1667When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1668non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1669shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1670explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1671specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1672@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1673either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1674appearing multiple times.
1675
28c309a2
NC
1676This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1677that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1678is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1679runtime linker would do.
1680
252b5132 1681The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1682libraries:
252b5132
RH
1683@enumerate
1684@item
ff5dcc92 1685Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1686@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1687Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1688between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1689specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1690used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1691at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1692by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1693the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1694@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1695On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1696@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1697environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1698@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1699On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1700directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1701@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1702For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1703variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ec4eb78a
L
1705For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1706@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1707libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1708@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1709@item
252b5132
RH
1710The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1711@item
1712For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1713exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1714@end enumerate
1715
1716If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1717warning and continue with the link.
1718@end ifset
1719
1720@kindex -shared
1721@kindex -Bshareable
1722@item -shared
1723@itemx -Bshareable
1724@cindex shared libraries
1725Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1726and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1727shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1728undefined symbols in the link.
1729
252b5132 1730@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1731@item --sort-common
1732@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1733@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1734This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1735ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1736sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1737eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1738between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1739specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1740
2509a395
SL
1741@kindex --sort-section=name
1742@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1743This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1744patterns in the linker script.
1745
2509a395
SL
1746@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1747@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1748This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1749patterns in the linker script.
1750
252b5132 1751@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1752@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1753Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1754each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1755size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1756
1757@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1759Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1760output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1761This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1762certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1763cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1764that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1765support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1766input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1767more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1768many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1769
1770@kindex --stats
1771@item --stats
1772Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1773as execution time and memory usage.
1774
2509a395 1775@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1776@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1777Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1778configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1779that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@kindex --traditional-format
1782@cindex traditional format
1783@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1784For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1785the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1786use the traditional format instead.
1787
1788@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1789For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1790symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1791full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1792@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1793trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1794combine duplicate entries.
1795
2509a395
SL
1796@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1797@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1798Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1799address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1800times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1801line.
1802@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1803for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1804@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1805should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1806sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1807
2509a395
SL
1808@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1810@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1811@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1812@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1814@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1815Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1816@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1817
2509a395
SL
1818@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1819@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1820@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1821When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1822of the first byte of the text segment.
1823
560e09e9
NC
1824@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1825@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1826Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1827values for @samp{method}:
1828
1829@table @samp
1830@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1831Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1832
1833@item report-all
da8bce14 1834Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1835
1836@item ignore-in-object-files
1837Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1838ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1839
1840@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1841Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1842ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1843when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1844libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1845command line.
1846@end table
1847
1848The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1849by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1850
1851Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1852unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1853can change this to a warning.
1854
1715a13c
L
1855@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1856@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1857@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1858@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1859Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1860supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1861the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1862argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1863
1864@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1865@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1866@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1867Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1868used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1869about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1870is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1871see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1872use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1873symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1874@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1875
7ce691ae 1876@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1877@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1878@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1879@item --warn-common
1880Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1881a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1882but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1883you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1884Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1885warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1886
1887There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1888
1889@table @samp
1890@item int i = 1;
1891A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1892file.
1893
1894@item extern int i;
1895An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1896There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1897variable somewhere.
1898
1899@item int i;
1900A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1901variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1902The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1903single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1904size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1905a definition of the same variable.
1906@end table
1907
1908The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1909Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1910just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1911encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1912a common symbol.
1913
1914@enumerate
1915@item
1916Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1917definition for the symbol.
1918@smallexample
1919@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1920 overridden by definition
1921@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1922@end smallexample
1923
1924@item
1925Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1926the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1927except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1928@smallexample
1929@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1930 overriding common
1931@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1932@end smallexample
1933
1934@item
1935Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1936@smallexample
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1938 of `@var{symbol}'
1939@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1940@end smallexample
1941
1942@item
1943Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1944@smallexample
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1946 overridden by larger common
1947@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1948@end smallexample
1949
1950@item
1951Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1952the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1953encountered in a different order.
1954@smallexample
1955@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1956 overriding smaller common
1957@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1958@end smallexample
1959@end enumerate
1960
1961@kindex --warn-constructors
1962@item --warn-constructors
1963Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1964object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1965detect the use of global constructors.
1966
1967@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1968@item --warn-multiple-gp
1969Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1970This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1971Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1972section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1973of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1974base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1975base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1976bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1977large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1978values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1979option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1980
1981@kindex --warn-once
1982@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1983@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1984@item --warn-once
1985Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1986which refers to it.
1987
1988@kindex --warn-section-align
1989@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1990@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1991@item --warn-section-align
1992Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1993alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1994The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1995is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1996the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1997
8fdd7217
NC
1998@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1999@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2000Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2001
a0c402a5
L
2002@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2003@item --warn-alternate-em
2004Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2005
560e09e9
NC
2006@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2008If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2009@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2010This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2011
2012@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2013@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2014This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2015it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2016
252b5132
RH
2017@kindex --whole-archive
2018@cindex including an entire archive
2019@item --whole-archive
2020For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2021@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2022in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2023files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2024library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2025library. This option may be used more than once.
2026
7ec229ce 2027Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2028about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2029Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2030list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2031your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2032
2509a395
SL
2033@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2034@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2035Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2036@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2037undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2038@var{symbol}.
2039
2040This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2041wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2042wishes to call the system function, it should call
2043@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2044
2045Here is a trivial example:
2046
2047@smallexample
2048void *
cc2f008e 2049__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2050@{
cc2f008e 2051 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2052 return __real_malloc (c);
2053@}
2054@end smallexample
2055
ff5dcc92 2056If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2057all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2058instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2059call the real @code{malloc} function.
2060
2061You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2062links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2063you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2064file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2065call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2066
6aa29e7b
JJ
2067@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2068@item --eh-frame-hdr
2069Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2070@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2071
e41b3a13
JJ
2072@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2073@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2074Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2075generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2076if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2077
6c1439be
L
2078@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2079@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2080@item --enable-new-dtags
2081@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2082This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2083systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2084@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2085If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2086created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2087those options are only available for ELF systems.
2088
2d643429 2089@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2090@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2091Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2092close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2093time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2094increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2095value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2096
fdc90cb4
JJ
2097@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2098@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2099Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2100@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2101new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2102the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2103hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2104
35835446
JR
2105@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2106@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2107This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2108linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2109for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2110about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2111
4f9c04f7 2112Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21131021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2114run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2115has been used.
2116
2117The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2118enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2119
c0065db7
RM
2120@kindex --build-id
2121@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2122@item --build-id
2123@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2124Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2125The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2126file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2127@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2128parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2129@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2130@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2131an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2132characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2133omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2134
2135The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2136that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2137unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2138to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2139file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2140string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2141
2142Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2143@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2144@end table
2145
0285c67d
NC
2146@c man end
2147
36f63dca 2148@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2149
0285c67d
NC
2150@c man begin OPTIONS
2151
ff5dcc92 2152The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2153the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2154normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2155use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2156@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2157like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2158symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2159object file).
2160
2161In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2162support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2163PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2164values by either a space or an equals sign.
2165
ff5dcc92 2166@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2167
2168@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2169@item --add-stdcall-alias
2170If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2171as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2172[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --base-file
2175@item --base-file @var{file}
2176Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2177addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2178@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2179[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2180
2181@kindex --dll
2182@item --dll
2183Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2184@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2185file.
bb10df36 2186[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2187
88183869
DK
2188@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2189@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2190@item --enable-long-section-names
2191@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2192The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2193the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2194for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2195fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2196to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2197allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2198disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2199generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2200as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2201with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2202GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2203information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2204option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2205section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2206when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2207image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2208[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2209
252b5132
RH
2210@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2211@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2212@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2213@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2214If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2215do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2216only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2217resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2218undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2219@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2220to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2221warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2222import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2223to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2224feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2225@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2226mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2227[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2228
522f09cd
KT
2229@kindex --leading-underscore
2230@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2231@item --leading-underscore
2232@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2233For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2234in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2235disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2236
252b5132
RH
2237@cindex DLLs, creating
2238@kindex --export-all-symbols
2239@item --export-all-symbols
2240If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2241be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2242otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2243explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2244attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2245option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2246@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2247@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2248exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2249re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2250such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2251@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2252@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2253Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2254not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2255extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2256(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2257These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2258@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2259@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2260@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2261@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2262[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2263
2264@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2265@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2266Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2267exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2268[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2269
2927aaca
NC
2270@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2271@item --exclude-all-symbols
2272Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2274
252b5132
RH
2275@kindex --file-alignment
2276@item --file-alignment
2277Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2278file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2279512.
bb10df36 2280[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2281
2282@cindex heap size
2283@kindex --heap
2284@item --heap @var{reserve}
2285@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2286Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2287to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2288committed.
bb10df36 2289[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2290
2291@cindex image base
2292@kindex --image-base
2293@item --image-base @var{value}
2294Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2295the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2296is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2297your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2298other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2299for dlls.
bb10df36 2300[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2301
2302@kindex --kill-at
2303@item --kill-at
2304If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2305symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2307
26d2d8a2
BF
2308@kindex --large-address-aware
2309@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2310If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2311header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2312greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2313or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2314section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2315[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2316
252b5132
RH
2317@kindex --major-image-version
2318@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2319Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2320[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2321
2322@kindex --major-os-version
2323@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2324Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2325[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2326
2327@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2328@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2329Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2330[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2331
2332@kindex --minor-image-version
2333@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2334Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2335[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2336
2337@kindex --minor-os-version
2338@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2339Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2341
2342@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2343@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2344Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2345[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2346
2347@cindex DEF files, creating
2348@cindex DLLs, creating
2349@kindex --output-def
2350@item --output-def @var{file}
2351The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2352file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2353(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2354library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2355automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2356[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2357
b044cda1
CW
2358@cindex DLLs, creating
2359@kindex --out-implib
2360@item --out-implib @var{file}
2361The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2362import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2363import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2364may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2365makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2366creation step.
bb10df36 2367[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2368
2369@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2370@item --enable-auto-image-base
2371Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2372using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2373from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2374collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2375avoided.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2377
2378@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2379@item --disable-auto-image-base
2380Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2381user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2382default.
bb10df36 2383[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2384
2385@cindex DLLs, linking to
2386@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2387@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2388When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2389search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2390@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2391between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2392uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2393@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2394[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2395
2396@kindex --enable-auto-import
2397@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2398Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2399DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2400building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2401'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2402to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2403specification published by Microsoft.
2404
e2a83dd0
NC
2405Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2406data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2407placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2408around a problem with consts that is described here:
2409http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2410
4d8907ac
DS
2411Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2412see this message:
0d888aac 2413
ece2d90e 2414"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2415documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2416
ece2d90e
NC
2417This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2418ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2419allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2420fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2421constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2422multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2423this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2424of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2425the warning, and exit.
2426
2427There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2428data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2429
2fa9fc65
NC
2430One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2431of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2432this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2433
c0065db7
RM
2434A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2435that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2436there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2437a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2438
2439@example
2440extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2441extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2442 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2443@end example
2444
2445or
2446
2447@example
2448extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2449extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2450 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2451@end example
2452
c0065db7 2453For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2454is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2455
2456@example
2457extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2458extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2459 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2460@end example
2461
c406afaf
NC
2462or
2463
2464@example
2465extern long long extern_ll;
2466extern_ll -->
2467 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2468@end example
2469
2fa9fc65 2470A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2471'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2472@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2473requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2474building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2475merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2476between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2477constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2478
2479Original:
2480@example
2481--foo.h
2482extern int arr[];
2483--foo.c
2484#include "foo.h"
2485void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2486 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2487@}
2488@end example
2489
2490Solution 1:
2491@example
2492--foo.h
2493extern int arr[];
2494--foo.c
2495#include "foo.h"
2496void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2497 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2498 volatile int *parr = arr;
2499 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2500@}
2501@end example
2502
2503Solution 2:
2504@example
2505--foo.h
2506/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2507#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2508 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2509#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2510#else
2511#define FOO_IMPORT
2512#endif
2513extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2514--foo.c
2515#include "foo.h"
2516void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2517 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2518@}
2519@end example
2520
c0065db7 2521A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2522library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2523for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2524functions).
bb10df36 2525[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2526
2527@kindex --disable-auto-import
2528@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2529Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2530@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2532
2fa9fc65
NC
2533@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2534@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2536that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2537a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2538environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2540
2541@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2542@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2543Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2544DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2545[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2546
b044cda1
CW
2547@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2548@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2549Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2550[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2551
252b5132
RH
2552@kindex --section-alignment
2553@item --section-alignment
2554Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2555addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2557
2558@cindex stack size
2559@kindex --stack
2560@item --stack @var{reserve}
2561@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2562Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2563to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2564committed.
bb10df36 2565[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2566
2567@kindex --subsystem
2568@item --subsystem @var{which}
2569@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2570@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2571Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2572legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2573@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2574the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2575@var{which}.
bb10df36 2576[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2577
2f563b51
DK
2578The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2579of the PE file header:
2580[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2581
2582@kindex --dynamicbase
2583@item --dynamicbase
2584The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2585randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2586Vista for i386 PE targets.
2587
2588@kindex --forceinteg
2589@item --forceinteg
2590Code integrity checks are enforced.
2591
2592@kindex --nxcompat
2593@item --nxcompat
2594The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2595This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2596
2597@kindex --no-isolation
2598@item --no-isolation
2599Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2600
2601@kindex --no-seh
2602@item --no-seh
2603The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2604this image.
2605
2606@kindex --no-bind
2607@item --no-bind
2608Do not bind this image.
2609
2610@kindex --wdmdriver
2611@item --wdmdriver
2612The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2613
2614@kindex --tsaware
2615@item --tsaware
2616The image is Terminal Server aware.
2617
252b5132
RH
2618@end table
2619
0285c67d
NC
2620@c man end
2621
ac145307
BS
2622@ifset C6X
2623@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2624
2625@c man begin OPTIONS
2626
2627The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2628libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2629all executables use an index of 0.
2630
2631@table @gcctabopt
2632
2633@kindex --dsbt-size
2634@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2635This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2636or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2637entries.
2638
2639@kindex --dsbt-index
2640@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2641This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2642to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2643executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2644@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2645
fbd9ad90
PB
2646@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2647The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2648exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2649
ac145307
BS
2650@end table
2651
2652@c man end
2653@end ifset
2654
93fd0973
SC
2655@ifset M68HC11
2656@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2657
2658@c man begin OPTIONS
2659
2660The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2661memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2662
2663@table @gcctabopt
2664
2665@kindex --no-trampoline
2666@item --no-trampoline
2667This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2668is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2669instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2670
2671@kindex --bank-window
2672@item --bank-window @var{name}
2673This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2674the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2675The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2676paging and addresses within the memory window.
2677
2678@end table
2679
2680@c man end
2681@end ifset
2682
7fb9f789
NC
2683@ifset M68K
2684@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2685
2686@c man begin OPTIONS
2687
2688The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2689when linking for 68K targets.
2690
2691@table @gcctabopt
2692
2693@kindex --got
2694@item --got=@var{type}
2695This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2696@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2697@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2698Info entry for @file{ld}.
2699
2700@end table
2701
2702@c man end
2703@end ifset
2704
252b5132
RH
2705@ifset UsesEnvVars
2706@node Environment
2707@section Environment Variables
2708
0285c67d
NC
2709@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2710
560e09e9 2711You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2712@ifclear SingleFormat
2713@code{GNUTARGET},
2714@end ifclear
2715@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2716
36f63dca 2717@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2718@kindex GNUTARGET
2719@cindex default input format
2720@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2721use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2722of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2723@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2724of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2725attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2726this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2727there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2728object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2729BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2730in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2731@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2732
2733@kindex LDEMULATION
2734@cindex default emulation
2735@cindex emulation, default
2736@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2737@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2738behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2739available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2740the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2741variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2742linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2743
2744@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2745@cindex demangling, default
2746Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2747@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2748default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2749a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2750may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2751options.
2752
0285c67d
NC
2753@c man end
2754@end ifset
2755
252b5132
RH
2756@node Scripts
2757@chapter Linker Scripts
2758
2759@cindex scripts
2760@cindex linker scripts
2761@cindex command files
2762Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2763written in the linker command language.
2764
2765The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2766the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2767the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2768more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2769direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2770described below.
2771
2772The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2773yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2774linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2775to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2776such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2777
2778You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2779line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2780default linker script.
2781
2782You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2783to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2784Linker Scripts}.
2785
2786@menu
2787* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2788* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2789* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2790* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2791* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2792* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2793* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2794* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2795* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2796* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2797* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2798@end menu
2799
2800@node Basic Script Concepts
2801@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2802@cindex linker script concepts
2803We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2804describe the linker script language.
2805
2806The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2807file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2808@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2809The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2810purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2811among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2812section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2813in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2814
2815Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2816also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2817contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2818the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2819A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2820area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2821loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2822which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2823of debugging information.
2824
2825Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2826first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2827the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2828@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2829section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2830same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2831is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2832(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2833based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2834RAM address would be the VMA.
2835
2836You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2837program with the @samp{-h} option.
2838
2839Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2840@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2841has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2842information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2843will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2844static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2845referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2846
2847You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2848program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2849option.
2850
2851@node Script Format
2852@section Linker Script Format
2853@cindex linker script format
2854Linker scripts are text files.
2855
2856You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2857either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2858symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2859generally ignored.
2860
2861Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2862If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2863otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2864double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2865file name.
2866
2867You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2868@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2869to whitespace.
2870
2871@node Simple Example
2872@section Simple Linker Script Example
2873@cindex linker script example
2874@cindex example of linker script
2875Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2876
2877The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2878@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2879memory layout of the output file.
2880
2881The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2882describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2883code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2884@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2885Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2886your input files.
2887
2888For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28890x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2890linker script which will do that:
2891@smallexample
2892SECTIONS
2893@{
2894 . = 0x10000;
2895 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2896 . = 0x8000000;
2897 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2898 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2899@}
2900@end smallexample
2901
2902You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2903followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2904descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2905
252b5132
RH
2906The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2907sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2908counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2909other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2910current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2911incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2912@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2913
2914The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2915required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2916after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2917which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2918wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2919means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2920
2921Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2922@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2923@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2924
2925The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2926the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2927at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2928output section, the value of the location counter will be
2929@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2930effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2931immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2932
2933The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2934alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2935example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2936sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2937may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2938sections.
2939
2940That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2941
2942@node Simple Commands
2943@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2944@cindex linker script simple commands
2945In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2946
2947@menu
2948* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2949* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2950@ifclear SingleFormat
2951* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2952@end ifclear
2953
4a93e180 2954* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2955* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2956@end menu
2957
2958@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2959@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2960@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2961@cindex start of execution
2962@cindex first instruction
2963@cindex entry point
2964The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2965point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2966entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2967@smallexample
2968ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2969@end smallexample
2970
2971There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2972entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2973stopping when one of them succeeds:
2974@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2975@item
252b5132 2976the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2977@item
252b5132 2978the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2979@item
3ab904c4
NC
2980the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2981targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2982check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2983@item
252b5132 2984the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2985@item
252b5132
RH
2986The address @code{0}.
2987@end itemize
2988
2989@node File Commands
36f63dca 2990@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2991@cindex linker script file commands
2992Several linker script commands deal with files.
2993
2994@table @code
2995@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2996@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2997@cindex including a linker script
2998Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2999be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3000with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
300110 levels deep.
3002
4006703d
NS
3003You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3004@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3005
252b5132
RH
3006@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3007@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3008@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3009@cindex input files in linker scripts
3010@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3011@cindex linker script input object files
3012The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3013in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3014
3015For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3016a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3017then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3018
3019In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3020script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3021
e3f2db7f
AO
3022In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3023with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3024located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3025for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3026open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3027linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3028description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3029
ff5dcc92 3030If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3031name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3032@samp{-l}.
3033
3034When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3035files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3036script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3037
3038@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3039@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3040@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3041@cindex grouping input files
3042The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3043files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3044new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3045in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3046
b717d30e
JJ
3047@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3048@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3049@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3050This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3051commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3052as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3053with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3054when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3055@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3056and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3057setting afterwards.
3058
252b5132
RH
3059@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3060@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3061@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3062The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3063@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3064@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3065Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3066precedence.
3067
3068You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3069output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3070
3071@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3072@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3073@cindex library search path in linker script
3074@cindex archive search path in linker script
3075@cindex search path in linker script
3076The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3077@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3078@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3079on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3080are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3081the command line option are searched first.
3082
3083@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3084@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3085@cindex first input file
3086The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3087that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3088though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3089when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3090first file.
3091@end table
3092
3093@ifclear SingleFormat
3094@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3095@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3096A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3097
3098@table @code
3099@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3100@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3101@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3102@cindex output file format in linker script
3103The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3104output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3105exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3106(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3107line option takes precedence.
3108
3109You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3110formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3111This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3112desired endianness.
3113
3114If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3115will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3116output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3117used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3118
3119For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3120command:
3121@smallexample
3122OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3123@end smallexample
3124This says that the default format for the output file is
3125@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3126option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3127format.
3128
3129@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3130@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3131@cindex input file format in linker script
3132The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3133files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3134This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3135(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3136is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3137command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3138@end table
3139@end ifclear
3140
4a93e180
NC
3141@node REGION_ALIAS
3142@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3143@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3144@cindex region alias
3145@cindex region names
3146
3147Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3148@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3149
3150@smallexample
3151REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3152@end smallexample
3153
3154The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3155memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3156to memory regions. An example follows.
3157
3158Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3159memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3160that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3161non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3162access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3163read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3164sections:
3165
3166@itemize @bullet
3167@item
3168@code{.text} program code;
3169@item
3170@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3171@item
3172@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3173@item
3174@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3175@end itemize
3176
3177The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3178part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3179output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3180systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3181@code{C}:
3182@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3183@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3184@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3185@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3186@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3187@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3188@end multitable
3189The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3190loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3191the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3192the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3193
3194The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3195includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3196memory layout:
3197@smallexample
3198INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3199
3200SECTIONS
3201 @{
3202 .text :
3203 @{
3204 *(.text)
3205 @} > REGION_TEXT
3206 .rodata :
3207 @{
3208 *(.rodata)
3209 rodata_end = .;
3210 @} > REGION_RODATA
3211 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3212 @{
3213 data_start = .;
3214 *(.data)
3215 @} > REGION_DATA
3216 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3217 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3218 .bss :
3219 @{
3220 *(.bss)
3221 @} > REGION_BSS
3222 @}
3223@end smallexample
3224
3225Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3226regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3227variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3228@table @code
3229@item A
3230Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3231@smallexample
3232MEMORY
3233 @{
3234 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3235 @}
3236
3237REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3238REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3239REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3240REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3241@end smallexample
3242@item B
3243Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3244into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3245@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3246@smallexample
3247MEMORY
3248 @{
3249 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3250 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3251 @}
3252
3253REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3254REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3255REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3256REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3257@end smallexample
3258@item C
3259Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3260@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3261initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3262system start into the @code{RAM}.
3263@smallexample
3264MEMORY
3265 @{
3266 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3267 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3268 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3269 @}
3270
3271REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3272REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3273REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3274REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3275@end smallexample
3276@end table
3277
3278It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3279@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3280necessary:
3281@smallexample
3282#include <string.h>
3283
3284extern char data_start [];
3285extern char data_size [];
3286extern char data_load_start [];
3287
3288void copy_data(void)
3289@{
3290 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3291 @{
3292 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3293 @}
3294@}
3295@end smallexample
3296
252b5132 3297@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3298@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3299There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3300
3301@table @code
3302@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3303@kindex ASSERT
3304@cindex assertion in linker script
3305Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3306with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3307
3308@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3309@kindex EXTERN
3310@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3311Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3312symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3313modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3314each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3315command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3316
3317@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3318@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3319@cindex common allocation in linker script
3320This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3321to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3322output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3323
4818e05f
AM
3324@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3326@cindex common allocation in linker script
3327This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3328command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3329to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3330
53d25da6
AM
3331@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3332@kindex INSERT
3333@cindex insert user script into default script
3334This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3335augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3336inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3337@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3338default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3339sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3340linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3341insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3342linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3343default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3344of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3345to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3346is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3347
3348@smallexample
3349SECTIONS
3350@{
3351 OVERLAY :
3352 @{
3353 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3354 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3355 @}
3356@}
3357INSERT AFTER .text;
3358@end smallexample
3359
252b5132
RH
3360@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3361@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3362@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3363This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3364references among certain output sections.
3365
3366In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3367using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3368will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3369errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3370a function defined in the other section.
3371
3372The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3373@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3374an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3375@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3376names.
3377
3378@ifclear SingleFormat
3379@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3380@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3381@cindex machine architecture
3382@cindex architecture
3383Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3384of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3385architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3386the @samp{-f} option.
3387@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3388
3389@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3390@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3391This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3392@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3393in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3394@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3395@end table
3396
3397@node Assignments
3398@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3399@cindex assignment in scripts
3400@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3401@cindex variables, defining
3402You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3403the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3404
3405@menu
3406* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3407* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3408* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3409* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3410@end menu
3411
3412@node Simple Assignments
3413@subsection Simple Assignments
3414
3415You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3416
3417@table @code
3418@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3419@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3420@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3421@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3422@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3423@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3424@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3425@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3426@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3427@end table
3428
3429The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3430@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3431defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3432
3433The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3434may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3435
3436The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3437
3438Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3439
3440You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3441statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3442section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3443
3444The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3445expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3446
3447Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3448assignments may be used:
3449
3450@smallexample
3451floating_point = 0;
3452SECTIONS
3453@{
3454 .text :
3455 @{
3456 *(.text)
3457 _etext = .;
3458 @}
156e34dd 3459 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3460 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3461@}
3462@end smallexample
3463@noindent
3464In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3465zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3466the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3467defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3468upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3469
3470@node PROVIDE
3471@subsection PROVIDE
3472@cindex PROVIDE
3473In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3474only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3475the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3476@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3477@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3478@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3479@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3480@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3481
3482Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3483@smallexample
3484SECTIONS
3485@{
3486 .text :
3487 @{
3488 *(.text)
3489 _etext = .;
3490 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3491 @}
3492@}
3493@end smallexample
3494
3495In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3496underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3497the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3498underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3499If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3500linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3501
7af8e998
L
3502@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3503@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3504@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3505Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3506hidden and won't be exported.
3507
73ae6183
NC
3508@node Source Code Reference
3509@subsection Source Code Reference
3510
3511Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3512intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3513a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3514symbol that does not have a value.
3515
3516Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3517transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3518stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3519prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3520mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3521of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3522variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3523linker script variable might be referred to as:
3524
3525@smallexample
3526 extern int foo;
3527@end smallexample
3528
3529But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3530
3531@smallexample
3532 _foo = 1000;
3533@end smallexample
3534
3535In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3536transformation has taken place.
3537
3538When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3539things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3540in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3541second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3542table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3543contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3544value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3545
3546@smallexample
3547 int foo = 1000;
3548@end smallexample
3549
3550creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3551holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3552number 1000 is initially stored.
3553
3554When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3555first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3556memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3557So:
3558
3559@smallexample
3560 foo = 1;
3561@end smallexample
3562
3563looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3564associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3565address. Whereas:
3566
3567@smallexample
3568 int * a = & foo;
3569@end smallexample
3570
3571looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3572and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3573the variable @samp{a}.
3574
3575Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3576the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3577an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3578
3579@smallexample
3580 foo = 1000;
3581@end smallexample
3582
3583creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3584the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3585address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3586linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3587access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3588
3589Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3590you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3591use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3592section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3593linker script contains these declarations:
3594
3595@smallexample
3596@group
3597 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3598 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3599 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3600@end group
3601@end smallexample
3602
3603Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3604
3605@smallexample
3606@group
3607 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3608
73ae6183
NC
3609 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3610@end group
3611@end smallexample
3612
3613Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3614
252b5132 3615@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3616@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3617@kindex SECTIONS
3618The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3619into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3620
3621The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3622@smallexample
3623SECTIONS
3624@{
3625 @var{sections-command}
3626 @var{sections-command}
3627 @dots{}
3628@}
3629@end smallexample
3630
3631Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3632
3633@itemize @bullet
3634@item
3635an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3636@item
3637a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3638@item
3639an output section description
3640@item
3641an overlay description
3642@end itemize
3643
3644The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3645@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3646those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3647understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3648the layout of the output file.
3649
3650Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3651below.
3652
3653If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3654linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3655section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3656input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3657example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3658in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3659
3660@menu
3661* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3662* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3663* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3664* Input Section:: Input section description
3665* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3666* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3667* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3668* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3669* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3670@end menu
3671
3672@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3673@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3674The full description of an output section looks like this:
3675@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3676@group
7e7d5768 3677@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3678 [AT(@var{lma})]
3679 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3680 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3681 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3682 @{
3683 @var{output-section-command}
3684 @var{output-section-command}
3685 @dots{}
562d3460 3686 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3687@end group
3688@end smallexample
3689
3690Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3691
3692The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3693name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3694The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3695
3696Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3697
3698@itemize @bullet
3699@item
3700a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3701@item
3702an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3703@item
3704data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3705@item
3706a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3707@end itemize
3708
3709@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3710@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3711@cindex name, section
3712@cindex section name
3713The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3714meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3715support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3716must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3717example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3718output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3719names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3720quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3721characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3722commas must be quoted.
3723
3724The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3725Discarding}.
3726
3727@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3728@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3729@cindex address, section
3730@cindex section address
3731The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3732address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3733is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3734
3735If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3736section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3737to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3738alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3739contained within the output section.
3740
3741The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3742
3743@itemize @bullet
3744@item
3745If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3746is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3747in that region.
3748
3749@item
3750If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3751regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3752section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3753be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3754
3755@item
3756If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3757the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3758counter.
3759@end itemize
3760
3761@noindent
3762For example:
3763
252b5132
RH
3764@smallexample
3765.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3766@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3767
252b5132
RH
3768@noindent
3769and
ea5cae92 3770
252b5132
RH
3771@smallexample
3772.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3773@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3774
252b5132
RH
3775@noindent
3776are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3777@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3778counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3779counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3780input sections.
252b5132
RH
3781
3782The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3783For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3784so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3785do something like this:
3786@smallexample
3787.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3788@end smallexample
3789@noindent
3790This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3791aligned upward to the specified value.
3792
3793Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3794location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3795sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3796
3797@node Input Section
36f63dca 3798@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3799@cindex input sections
3800@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3801The most common output section command is an input section description.
3802
3803The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3804You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3805in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3806map the input files into your memory layout.
3807
3808@menu
3809* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3810* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3811* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3812* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3813* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3814@end menu
3815
3816@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3817@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3818@cindex input section basics
3819An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3820by a list of section names in parentheses.
3821
3822The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3823describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3824
3825The most common input section description is to include all input
3826sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3827include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3828@smallexample
3829*(.text)
3830@end smallexample
3831@noindent
18625d54
CM
3832Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3833of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3834match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3835example:
252b5132 3836@smallexample
b4346c09 3837*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3838@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3839will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3840@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3841
3842There are two ways to include more than one section:
3843@smallexample
3844*(.text .rdata)
3845*(.text) *(.rdata)
3846@end smallexample
3847@noindent
3848The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3849@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3850first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3851they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3852@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3853@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3854
3855You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3856You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3857needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3858@smallexample
3859data.o(.data)
3860@end smallexample
3861
967928e9
AM
3862You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3863matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3864with no whitespace around the colon.
3865
3866@table @samp
3867@item archive:file
3868matches file within archive
3869@item archive:
3870matches the whole archive
3871@item :file
3872matches file but not one in an archive
3873@end table
3874
3875Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3876wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3877single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3878@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3879within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3880also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3881other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3882from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3883command.
3884
252b5132
RH
3885If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3886the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3887commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3888@smallexample
3889data.o
3890@end smallexample
3891
967928e9
AM
3892When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3893and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3894characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3895name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3896did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3897though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3898@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3899the archive search path.
3900
3901@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3902@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3903@cindex input section wildcards
3904@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3905@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3906@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3907In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3908name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3909
3910The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3911pattern for the file name.
3912
3913The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3914
3915@table @samp
3916@item *
3917matches any number of characters
3918@item ?
3919matches any single character
3920@item [@var{chars}]
3921matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3922character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3923@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3924@item \
3925quotes the following character
3926@end table
3927
3928When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3929will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3930Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3931exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3932@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3933a @samp{/} character.
3934
3935File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3936specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3937does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3938
3939If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3940appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3941will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3942sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3943@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3944@smallexample
3945.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3946.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3947@end smallexample
3948
bcaa7b3e 3949@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3950Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3951in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3952this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3953pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3954@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3955into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3956
bcaa7b3e
L
3957@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3958@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3959difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3960ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3961
02ecc8e9
L
3962@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3963@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3964difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3965ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3966encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3967
bcaa7b3e
L
3968@cindex SORT
3969@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3970
3971When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3972can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3973
3974@enumerate
3975@item
3976@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3977It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3978sections have the same name.
3979@item
3980@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3981It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3982sections have the same alignment.
3983@item
c0065db7 3984@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3985treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3986@item
3987@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3988is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3989@item
3990All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3991@end enumerate
3992
3993When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3994section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3995takes precedence over the command line option.
3996
3997If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3998command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3999treated as nested sorting command.
4000
4001@enumerate
4002@item
4003@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4004@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4005@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4006@item
4007@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4008@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4009@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4010@end enumerate
4011
4012If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4013command line option will be ignored.
4014
252b5132
RH
4015If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4016@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4017precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4018
4019This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4020files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4021sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4022The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4023with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4024linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4025@smallexample
4026@group
4027SECTIONS @{
4028 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4029 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4030 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4031 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4032@}
4033@end group
4034@end smallexample
4035
4036@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4037@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4038@cindex common symbol placement
4039@cindex uninitialized data placement
4040A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4041file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4042linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4043named @samp{COMMON}.
4044
4045You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4046other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4047particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4048input files are placed in another section.
4049
4050In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4051@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4052@smallexample
4053.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4054@end smallexample
4055
4056@cindex scommon section
4057@cindex small common symbols
4058Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4059example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4060symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4061different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4062the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4063symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4064to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4065locations.
4066
4067@cindex [COMMON]
4068You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4069notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4070@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4071
4072@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4073@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4074@cindex KEEP
4075@cindex garbage collection
4076When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4077it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4078This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4079with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4080@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4081
4082@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4083@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4084The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4085to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4086start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4087@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4088follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4089@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4090@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4091All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4092files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4093
4094@smallexample
4095@group
4096SECTIONS @{
4097 outputa 0x10000 :
4098 @{
4099 all.o
4100 foo.o (.input1)
4101 @}
36f63dca
NC
4102@end group
4103@group
252b5132
RH
4104 outputb :
4105 @{
4106 foo.o (.input2)
4107 foo1.o (.input1)
4108 @}
36f63dca
NC
4109@end group
4110@group
252b5132
RH
4111 outputc :
4112 @{
4113 *(.input1)
4114 *(.input2)
4115 @}
4116@}
4117@end group
a1ab1d2a 4118@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4119
4120@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4121@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4122@cindex data
4123@cindex section data
4124@cindex output section data
4125@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4126@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4127@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4128@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4129@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4130You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4131@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4132an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4133parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4134value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4135counter.
4136
4137The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4138store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4139bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4140stored.
4141
4142For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4143of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4144@smallexample
4145BYTE(1)
4146LONG(addr)
4147@end smallexample
4148
4149When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4150same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4151target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4152@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4153@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4154
4155If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4156which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4157When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4158true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4159endianness of the first input object file.
4160
36f63dca 4161Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4162between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4163@smallexample
4164SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4165@end smallexample
4166whereas this will work:
4167@smallexample
4168SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4169@end smallexample
4170
252b5132
RH
4171@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4172@cindex holes, filling
4173@cindex unspecified memory
4174You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4175current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4176otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4177gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4178with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4179necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4180point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4181than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4182different parts of an output section.
4183
4184This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4185value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4186@smallexample
563e308f 4187FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4188@end smallexample
4189
4190The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4191section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4192part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4193entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4194precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4195expression.
252b5132
RH
4196
4197@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4198@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4199There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4200commands.
4201
4202@table @code
4203@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4204@cindex input filename symbols
4205@cindex filename symbols
4206@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4207The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4208The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4209file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4210the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4211
4212This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4213normally used for any other object file format.
4214
4215@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4216@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4217@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4218@item CONSTRUCTORS
4219When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4220unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4221destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4222arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4223automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4224For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4225linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4226@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4227ignored for other object file formats.
4228
4229The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4230constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4231Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4232the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4233first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4234of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4235compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4236formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4237@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4238the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4239destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4240@code{exit}.
4241
4242For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4243arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4244addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4245and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4246linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4247runtime code expects to see.
4248
4249@smallexample
4250 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4251 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4252 *(.ctors)
4253 LONG(0)
4254 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4255 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4256 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4257 *(.dtors)
4258 LONG(0)
4259 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4260@end smallexample
4261
4262If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4263which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4264are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4265are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4266command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4267@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4268@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4269@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4270
4271Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4272and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4273need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4274scripts.
4275
4276@end table
4277
4278@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4279@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4280@cindex discarding sections
4281@cindex sections, discarding
4282@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4283The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4284for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4285be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4286@smallexample
49c13adb 4287.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4288@end smallexample
4289@noindent
4290will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4291@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4292sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4293space in an output section will also create the output section.
4294
a0976ea4 4295The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4296on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4297symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4298the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4299section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4300
4301@cindex /DISCARD/
4302The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4303input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4304section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4305
4306@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4307@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4308@cindex output section attributes
4309We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4310like this:
0c71d759 4311
252b5132 4312@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4313@group
7e7d5768 4314@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4315 [AT(@var{lma})]
4316 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4317 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4318 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4319 @{
4320 @var{output-section-command}
4321 @var{output-section-command}
4322 @dots{}
562d3460 4323 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4324@end group
4325@end smallexample
0c71d759 4326
252b5132
RH
4327We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4328@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4329remaining section attributes.
4330
a1ab1d2a 4331@menu
252b5132
RH
4332* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4333* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4334* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4335* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4336* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4337* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4338* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4339* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4340@end menu
4341
4342@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4343@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4344Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4345parentheses. The following types are defined:
4346
4347@table @code
4348@item NOLOAD
4349The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4350loaded into memory when the program is run.
4351@item DSECT
4352@itemx COPY
4353@itemx INFO
4354@itemx OVERLAY
4355These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4356rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4357marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4358section when the program is run.
4359@end table
4360
4361@kindex NOLOAD
4362@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4363@cindex loading, preventing
4364The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4365the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4366the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4367@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4368need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4369@smallexample
4370@group
4371SECTIONS @{
4372 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4373 @dots{}
4374@}
4375@end group
4376@end smallexample
4377
4378@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4379@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4380@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4381@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4382@cindex load address
4383@cindex section load address
4384Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4385@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4386@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4387specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4388address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4389
ea5cae92
NC
4390The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4391specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4392takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4393load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4394region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4395
4396If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4397section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4398load address:
4399
4400@itemize @bullet
4401@item
4402If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4403the LMA address as well.
4404
4405@item
4406If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4407
4408@item
4409Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4410with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4411section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4412VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4413the last section in the located region.
4414
4415@item
4416If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4417that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4418
4419@item
4420If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4421section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4422@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4423
4424@cindex ROM initialized data
4425@cindex initialized data in ROM
4426This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4427example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4428called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4429@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4430even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4431uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4432defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4433counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4434
4435@smallexample
4436@group
4437SECTIONS
4438 @{
4439 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4440 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4441 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4442 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4443 .bss 0x3000 :
4444 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4445@}
4446@end group
4447@end smallexample
4448
4449The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4450this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4451the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4452how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4453script.
4454
4455@smallexample
4456@group
4457extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4458char *src = &_etext;
4459char *dst = &_data;
4460
ea5cae92
NC
4461/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4462while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4463 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4464
ea5cae92 4465/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4466for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4467 *dst = 0;
4468@end group
4469@end smallexample
4470
bbf115d3
L
4471@node Forced Output Alignment
4472@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4473@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4474@cindex forcing output section alignment
4475@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4476You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4477
7e7d5768
AM
4478@node Forced Input Alignment
4479@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4480@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4481@cindex forcing input section alignment
4482@cindex input section alignment
4483You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4484SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4485sections, whether larger or smaller.
4486
0c71d759
NC
4487@node Output Section Constraint
4488@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4489@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4490@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4491@cindex constraints on output sections
4492You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4493of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4494read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4495@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4496
252b5132 4497@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4498@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4499@kindex >@var{region}
4500@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4501@cindex memory regions and sections
4502You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4503using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4504
4505Here is a simple example:
4506@smallexample
4507@group
4508MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4509SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4510@end group
4511@end smallexample
4512
4513@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4514@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4515@kindex :@var{phdr}
4516@cindex section, assigning to program header
4517@cindex program headers and sections
4518You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4519using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4520one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4521assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4522@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4523linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4524
4525Here is a simple example:
4526@smallexample
4527@group
4528PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4529SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4530@end group
4531@end smallexample
4532
4533@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4534@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4535@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4536@cindex section fill pattern
4537@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4538You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4539@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4540(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4541within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4542alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4543necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4544of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4545an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4546fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4547other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4548pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4549expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4550
4551You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4552output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4553
4554Here is a simple example:
4555@smallexample
4556@group
563e308f 4557SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4558@end group
4559@end smallexample
4560
4561@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4562@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4563@kindex OVERLAY
4564@cindex overlays
4565An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4566are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4567the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4568copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4569required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4570can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4571than another.
4572
4573Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4574@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4575output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4576command is as follows:
4577@smallexample
4578@group
4579OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4580 @{
4581 @var{secname1}
4582 @{
4583 @var{output-section-command}
4584 @var{output-section-command}
4585 @dots{}
4586 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4587 @var{secname2}
4588 @{
4589 @var{output-section-command}
4590 @var{output-section-command}
4591 @dots{}
4592 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4593 @dots{}
4594 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4595@end group
4596@end smallexample
4597
4598Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4599section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4600section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4601those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4602except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4603sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4604
4605The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4606addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4607memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4608whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4609and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4610and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4611
4612If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4613among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4614all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4615section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4616NOCROSSREFS}.
4617
4618For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4619provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4620defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4621@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4622the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4623within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4624symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4625
4626At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4627the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4628
4629Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4630@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4631@smallexample
4632@group
4633 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4634 @{
4635 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4636 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4637 @}
4638@end group
4639@end smallexample
4640@noindent
4641This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4642address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4643@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4644following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4645@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4646@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4647
4648C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4649like the following.
4650
4651@smallexample
4652@group
4653 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4654 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4655 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4656@end group
4657@end smallexample
4658
4659Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4660everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4661example could have been written identically as follows.
4662
4663@smallexample
4664@group
4665 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4666 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4667 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4668 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4669 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4670 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4671 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4672@end group
4673@end smallexample
4674
4675@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4676@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4677@kindex MEMORY
4678@cindex memory regions
4679@cindex regions of memory
4680@cindex allocating memory
4681@cindex discontinuous memory
4682The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4683memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4684
4685The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4686memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4687may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4688can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4689set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4690regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4691around to fit into the available regions.
4692
4693A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4694command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4695you wish. The syntax is:
4696@smallexample
4697@group
a1ab1d2a 4698MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4699 @{
4700 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4701 @dots{}
4702 @}
4703@end group
4704@end smallexample
4705
4706The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4707region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4708Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4709with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4710must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4711add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4712command.
252b5132
RH
4713
4714@cindex memory region attributes
4715The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4716whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4717not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4718@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4719section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4720the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4721them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4722
4723The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4724@table @samp
4725@item R
4726Read-only section
4727@item W
4728Read/write section
4729@item X
4730Executable section
4731@item A
4732Allocatable section
4733@item I
4734Initialized section
4735@item L
4736Same as @samp{I}
4737@item !
c09e9a8c 4738Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4739@end table
4740
4741If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4742@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4743attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4744in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4745attributes.
4746
4747@kindex ORIGIN =
4748@kindex o =
4749@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4750The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4751the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4752cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4753abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4754@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4755
4756@kindex LENGTH =
4757@kindex len =
4758@kindex l =
4759The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4760region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4761be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4762@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4763
4764In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4765available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4766and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4767linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4768is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4769or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4770explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4771region.
4772
4773@smallexample
4774@group
a1ab1d2a 4775MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4776 @{
4777 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4778 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4779 @}
4780@end group
4781@end smallexample
4782
4783Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4784specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4785@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4786a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4787output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4788was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4789the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4790output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4791region, the linker will issue an error message.
4792
3ec57632 4793It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4794expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4795@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4796
4797@smallexample
4798@group
c0065db7 4799 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4800@end group
4801@end smallexample
4802
252b5132
RH
4803@node PHDRS
4804@section PHDRS Command
4805@kindex PHDRS
4806@cindex program headers
4807@cindex ELF program headers
4808@cindex program segments
4809@cindex segments, ELF
4810The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4811@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4812loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4813program with the @samp{-p} option.
4814
4815When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4816reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4817program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4818This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4819interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4820
4821The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4822in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4823precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4824the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4825not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4826
4827The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4828generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4829ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4830
4831This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4832@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4833
4834@smallexample
4835@group
4836PHDRS
4837@{
4838 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4839 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4840@}
4841@end group
4842@end smallexample
4843
4844The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4845of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4846header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4847with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4848must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4849is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4850
4851Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4852system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4853specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4854sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4855attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4856Section Phdr}.
4857
4858It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4859merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4860repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4861contain the section.
4862
4863If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4864then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4865not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4866convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4867placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4868default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4869segment at all.
4870
4871@kindex FILEHDR
4872@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4873You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4874the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4875The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4876file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4877include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4878segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4879these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4880
4881The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4882value of the keyword.
4883
4884@table @asis
4885@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4886Indicates an unused program header.
4887
4888@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4889Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4890the file.
4891
4892@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4893Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4894
4895@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4896Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4897found.
4898
4899@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4900Indicates a segment holding note information.
4901
4902@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4903A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4904ABI.
4905
4906@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4907Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4908
4909@item @var{expression}
4910An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4911be used for types not defined above.
4912@end table
4913
4914You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4915in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4916@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4917Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4918output section attribute.
4919
4920The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4921which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4922explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4923an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4924header.
4925
4926Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4927headers used on a native ELF system.
4928
4929@example
4930@group
4931PHDRS
4932@{
4933 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4934 interp PT_INTERP ;
4935 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4936 data PT_LOAD ;
4937 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4938@}
4939
4940SECTIONS
4941@{
4942 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4943 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4944 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4945 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4946 @dots{}
4947 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4948 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4949 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4950 @dots{}
4951@}
4952@end group
4953@end example
4954
4955@node VERSION
4956@section VERSION Command
4957@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4958@cindex symbol versions
4959@cindex version script
4960@cindex versions of symbols
4961The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4962only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4963symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4964a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4965shared library.
4966
4967You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4968you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4969also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4970
4971The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4972@smallexample
4973VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4974@end smallexample
4975
4976The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4977Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4978version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4979version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4980version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4981scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4982library.
4983
4984The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4985examples.
4986
4987@smallexample
4988VERS_1.1 @{
4989 global:
4990 foo1;
4991 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4992 old*;
4993 original*;
4994 new*;
252b5132
RH
4995@};
4996
4997VERS_1.2 @{
4998 foo2;
4999@} VERS_1.1;
5000
5001VERS_2.0 @{
5002 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5003 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5004 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5005 "f(int, double)";
5006 @};
252b5132
RH
5007@} VERS_1.2;
5008@end smallexample
5009
5010This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5011version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5012The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5013a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5014of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5015symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5016is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5017in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5018However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5019name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5020
5021Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5022depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5023to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5024
5025Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5026depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5027and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5028
5029When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5030specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5031unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5032unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5033somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5034wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5035wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5036set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5037ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5038
5039The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5040they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5041could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5042However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5043
0f6bf451 5044Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5045in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5046symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5047won't.
5048
5049@smallexample
7c9c73be 5050@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5051@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5052
252b5132
RH
5053When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5054symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5055requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5056shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5057loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5058linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5059application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5060way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5061all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5062search for each symbol reference.
5063
5064The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5065doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5066that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5067functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5068the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5069required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5070that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5071versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5072the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5073
5074There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5075first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5076source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5077script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5078maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5079@smallexample
5080__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5081@end smallexample
5082@noindent
5083in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5084be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5085The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5086@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5087takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5088
5089The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5090function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5091an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5092version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5093linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5094
5095To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5096source file. Here is an example:
5097
5098@smallexample
5099__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5100__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5101__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5102__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5103@end smallexample
5104
5105In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5106unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5107example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5108@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5109
5110When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5111some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5112this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5113@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5114declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5115you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5116
5117If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5118within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5119(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5120specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5121
cb840a31
L
5122You can also specify the language in the version script:
5123
5124@smallexample
5125VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5126@end smallexample
5127
c0065db7 5128The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5129The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5130demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5131patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5132@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5133
86043bbb
MM
5134Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5135described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5136or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5137the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5138whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5139cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5140might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5141should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5142expect when you upgrade.
5143
252b5132
RH
5144@node Expressions
5145@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5146@cindex expressions
5147@cindex arithmetic
5148The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5149that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5150expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5151host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5152
5153You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5154
5155The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5156expressions.
5157
5158@menu
5159* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5160* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5161* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5162* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5163* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5164* Operators:: Operators
5165* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5166* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5167* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5168@end menu
5169
5170@node Constants
5171@subsection Constants
5172@cindex integer notation
5173@cindex constants in linker scripts
5174All constants are integers.
5175
5176As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5177octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5178hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5179@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5180@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5181value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5182
5183@cindex scaled integers
5184@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5185@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5186@cindex suffixes for integers
5187@cindex integer suffixes
5188In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5189constant by
5190@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5191@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5192@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5193@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5194@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5195@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5196@tex
5197${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5198@end tex
5199@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5200respectively. For example, the following
5201all refer to the same quantity:
5202
252b5132 5203@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5204_fourk_1 = 4K;
5205_fourk_2 = 4096;
5206_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5207_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5208@end smallexample
5209
8a308ae8
NC
5210Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5211conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5212
0c71d759
NC
5213@node Symbolic Constants
5214@subsection Symbolic Constants
5215@cindex symbolic constants
5216@kindex CONSTANT
5217It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5218the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5219
5220@table @code
5221@item MAXPAGESIZE
5222@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5223The target's maximum page size.
5224
5225@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5226@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5227The target's default page size.
5228@end table
5229
5230So for example:
5231
5232@smallexample
5233 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5234@end smallexample
5235
5236will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5237supported by the target.
5238
252b5132
RH
5239@node Symbols
5240@subsection Symbol Names
5241@cindex symbol names
5242@cindex names
5243@cindex quoted symbol names
5244@kindex "
5245Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5246and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5247Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5248specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5249keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5250@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5251"SECTION" = 9;
5252"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5253@end smallexample
5254
5255Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5256to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5257whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5258
ecca9871
L
5259@node Orphan Sections
5260@subsection Orphan Sections
5261@cindex orphan
5262Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5263are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5264script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5265output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5266placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5267attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5268same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5269If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5270at the end of the file.
5271
5272For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5273well as section flag.
5274
41911f68 5275If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5276the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5277__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5278section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5279orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5280representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5281character.
5282
252b5132
RH
5283@node Location Counter
5284@subsection The Location Counter
5285@kindex .
5286@cindex dot
5287@cindex location counter
5288@cindex current output location
5289The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5290current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5291location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5292within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5293anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5294
5295@cindex holes
5296Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5297moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5298location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5299and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5300doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5301
5302@smallexample
5303SECTIONS
5304@{
5305 output :
5306 @{
5307 file1(.text)
5308 . = . + 1000;
5309 file2(.text)
5310 . += 1000;
5311 file3(.text)
563e308f 5312 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5313@}
5314@end smallexample
5315@noindent
5316In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5317located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5318followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5319@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5320@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5321specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5322
5c6bbab8
NC
5323@cindex dot inside sections
5324Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5325current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5326statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5327absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5328however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5329not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5330
5331@smallexample
5332SECTIONS
5333@{
5334 . = 0x100
5335 .text: @{
5336 *(.text)
5337 . = 0x200
5338 @}
5339 . = 0x500
5340 .data: @{
5341 *(.data)
5342 . += 0x600
5343 @}
5344@}
5345@end smallexample
5346
5347The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5348and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5349the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5350much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5351move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5352and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5353the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5354the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5355
b5666f2f
AM
5356@cindex dot outside sections
5357Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5358output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5359needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5360
5361@smallexample
5362SECTIONS
5363@{
5364 start_of_text = . ;
5365 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5366 end_of_text = . ;
5367
5368 start_of_data = . ;
5369 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5370 end_of_data = . ;
5371@}
5372@end smallexample
5373
5374If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5375not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5376between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5377should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5378blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5379the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5380sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5381statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5382special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5383place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5384as follows:
5385
5386@smallexample
5387SECTIONS
5388@{
5389 start_of_text = . ;
5390 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5391 end_of_text = . ;
5392
5393 start_of_data = . ;
5394 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5395 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5396 end_of_data = . ;
5397@}
5398@end smallexample
5399
5400This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5401@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5402placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5403assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5404a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5405section. So you could write:
5406
5407@smallexample
5408SECTIONS
5409@{
5410 start_of_text = . ;
5411 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5412 end_of_text = . ;
5413
5414 . = . ;
5415 start_of_data = . ;
5416 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5417 end_of_data = . ;
5418@}
5419@end smallexample
5420
5421Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5422@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5423
252b5132
RH
5424@need 2000
5425@node Operators
5426@subsection Operators
5427@cindex operators for arithmetic
5428@cindex arithmetic operators
5429@cindex precedence in expressions
5430The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5431the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5432@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5433@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5434@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5435@smallexample
5436precedence associativity Operators Notes
5437(highest)
54381 left ! - ~ (1)
54392 left * / %
54403 left + -
54414 left >> <<
54425 left == != > < <= >=
54436 left &
54447 left |
54458 left &&
54469 left ||
544710 right ? :
544811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5449(lowest)
5450@end smallexample
5451Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5452(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5453(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5454@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5455@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5456@tex
5457\vskip \baselineskip
5458%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5459\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5460\hrule
5461\halign
5462{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5463height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5464&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5465height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5466\noalign{\hrule}
5467height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5468&highest&&&&&\cr
5469% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5470&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5471&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5472&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5473&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5474&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5475&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5476&7&&left&&|&\cr
5477&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5478&9&&left&&||&\cr
5479&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5480&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5481&lowest&&&&&\cr
5482height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5483\hrule}
5484@end tex
5485@iftex
5486{
5487@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5488@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5489@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5490}
5491@end iftex
5492@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5493
5494@node Evaluation
5495@subsection Evaluation
5496@cindex lazy evaluation
5497@cindex expression evaluation order
5498The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5499an expression when absolutely necessary.
5500
5501The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5502address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5503regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5504as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5505
5506However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5507until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5508other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5509for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5510
5511The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5512assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5513allocation.
5514
5515Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5516@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5517
5518If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5519available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5520following
5521@smallexample
5522@group
5523SECTIONS
5524 @{
a1ab1d2a 5525 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5526 @{ *(.text) @}
5527 @}
5528@end group
5529@end smallexample
5530@noindent
5531will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5532address}.
5533
5534@node Expression Section
5535@subsection The Section of an Expression
5536@cindex expression sections
5537@cindex absolute expressions
5538@cindex relative expressions
5539@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5540@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5541@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5542Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5543relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5544using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5545value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5546symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5547operations.
5548
abf4be64
AM
5549Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5550section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5551address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5552@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5553functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5554One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5555(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5556differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5557versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5558section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5559Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5560absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5561given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5562everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5563
5564In the following simple example,
252b5132 5565
7542af2a
AM
5566@smallexample
5567@group
5568SECTIONS
5569 @{
5570 . = 0x100;
5571 __executable_start = 0x100;
5572 .data :
5573 @{
5574 . = 0x10;
5575 __data_start = 0x10;
5576 *(.data)
5577 @}
5578 @dots{}
5579 @}
5580@end group
5581@end smallexample
252b5132 5582
7542af2a
AM
5583both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5584address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5585@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5586section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5587
5c3049d2
AM
5588For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5589addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5590
5591@itemize @bullet
5592@item
5593Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5594relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5595and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5596@item
5597Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5598or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5599same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5600address before applying the operator.
5601@end itemize
5602
5603The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5604
5605@itemize @bullet
5606@item
5607An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5608@item
5609The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5610@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5611The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5612relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5613(after above conversions) is also a number.
5614@item
5615The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5616relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5617section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5618@item
5619The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5620conversions) is an absolute address.
5621@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5622
5623You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5624to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5625create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5626section @samp{.data}:
5627@smallexample
5628SECTIONS
5629 @{
5630 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5631 @}
5632@end smallexample
5633@noindent
5634If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5635@samp{.data} section.
5636
7542af2a
AM
5637Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5638particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5639
252b5132
RH
5640@node Builtin Functions
5641@subsection Builtin Functions
5642@cindex functions in expressions
5643The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5644use in linker script expressions.
5645
5646@table @code
5647@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5648@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5649@cindex expression, absolute
5650Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5651of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5652value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5653normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5654
5655@item ADDR(@var{section})
5656@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5657@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5658Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5659script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5660the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5661@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5662@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5663the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5664@smallexample
5665@group
5666SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5667 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5668 @{
252b5132
RH
5669 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5670 @dots{}
5671 @}
5672 .output :
5673 @{
5674 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5675 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5676 @}
5677@dots{} @}
5678@end group
5679@end smallexample
5680
876f4090
NS
5681@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5682@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5683@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5684@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5685@cindex round up location counter
5686@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5687@cindex round up expression
5688@cindex align expression
5689Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5690to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5691doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5692arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5693expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5694equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5695
5696Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5697next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5698variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5699input sections:
252b5132
RH
5700@smallexample
5701@group
5702SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5703 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5704 *(.data)
5705 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5706 @}
5707@dots{} @}
5708@end group
5709@end smallexample
5710@noindent
5711The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5712a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5713a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5714of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5715
5716The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5717
362c1d1a
NS
5718@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5719@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5720@cindex section alignment
5721Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5722been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5723evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5724the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5725value in that section.
5726@smallexample
5727@group
5728SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5729 .output @{
5730 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5731 @dots{}
5732 @}
5733@dots{} @}
5734@end group
5735@end smallexample
5736
252b5132
RH
5737@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5738@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5739This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5740scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5741section.
5742
2d20f7bf
JJ
5743@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5744@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5745This is equivalent to either
5746@smallexample
5747(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5748@end smallexample
5749or
5750@smallexample
5751(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5752@end smallexample
5753@noindent
5754depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5755for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5756@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5757If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5758memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5759bytes in the on-disk file.
5760
5761This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5762any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5763@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5764be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5765working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5766
5767@noindent
5768Example:
5769@smallexample
5770 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5771@end smallexample
5772
5773@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5774@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5775This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5776evaluation purposes.
5777
5778@smallexample
5779 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5780@end smallexample
5781
a4f5ad88
JJ
5782@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5783@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5784This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5785@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5786When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5787does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5788@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5789boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5790it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5791@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5792
5793@smallexample
5794 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5795@end smallexample
5796
252b5132
RH
5797@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5798@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5799@cindex symbol defaults
5800Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5801defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5802return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5803default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5804shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5805the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5806existed, its value is preserved:
5807
5808@smallexample
5809@group
5810SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5811 .text : @{
5812 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5813 @dots{}
5814 @}
5815 @dots{}
5816@}
5817@end group
5818@end smallexample
5819
3ec57632
NC
5820@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5821@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5822Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5823
252b5132
RH
5824@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5825@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5826@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5827Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5828Section LMA}).
5829
5830@kindex MAX
5831@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5832Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5833
5834@kindex MIN
5835@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5836Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5837
5838@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5839@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5840@cindex unallocated address, next
5841Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5842This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5843use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5844output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5845
3ec57632
NC
5846@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5847@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5848Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5849
ba916c8a
MM
5850@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5851@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5852Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5853value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5854option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5855@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5856be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5857``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5858name.
5859
252b5132
RH
5860@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5861@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5862@cindex section size
5863Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5864been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5865evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5866@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5867@smallexample
5868@group
5869SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5870 .output @{
5871 .start = . ;
5872 @dots{}
5873 .end = . ;
5874 @}
5875 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5876 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5877@dots{} @}
5878@end group
5879@end smallexample
5880
5881@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5882@itemx sizeof_headers
5883@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5884@cindex header size
5885Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5886information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5887this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5888choose, to facilitate paging.
5889
5890@cindex not enough room for program headers
5891@cindex program headers, not enough room
5892When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5893@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5894number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5895addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5896additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5897room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5898the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5899script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5900you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5901command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5902@end table
5903
5904@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5905@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5906@cindex implicit linker scripts
5907If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5908an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5909linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5910linker will report an error.
5911
5912An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5913
5914Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5915assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5916commands.
5917
5918Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5919at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5920read. This can affect archive searching.
5921
5922@ifset GENERIC
5923@node Machine Dependent
5924@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5925
5926@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5927@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5928sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5929functionality are not listed.
5930
5931@menu
36f63dca
NC
5932@ifset H8300
5933* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5934@end ifset
5935@ifset I960
5936* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5937@end ifset
5938@ifset ARM
5939* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5940@end ifset
5941@ifset HPPA
5942* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5943@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5944@ifset M68K
5945* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5946@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5947@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5948* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5949@end ifset
2469cfa2 5950@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5951* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5952@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5953@ifset M68HC11
5954* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5955@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5956@ifset POWERPC
5957* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5958@end ifset
5959@ifset POWERPC64
5960* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5961@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5962@ifset SPU
5963* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5964@end ifset
74459f0e 5965@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5966* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5967@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5968@ifset WIN32
5969* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5970@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5971@ifset XTENSA
5972* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5973@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5974@end menu
5975@end ifset
5976
252b5132
RH
5977@ifset H8300
5978@ifclear GENERIC
5979@raisesections
5980@end ifclear
5981
5982@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5983@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5984
5985@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5986For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5987you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5988
5989@table @emph
5990@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5991@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5992@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5993targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5994program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5995respectively.
5996
5997@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5998@item synthesizing instructions
5999@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6000@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6001sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6002page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6003(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6004@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6005top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6006
6007@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6008@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6009biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6010which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6011page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6012(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6013@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6014the top page of memory).
6015
6016@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6017@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
601832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6019changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6020(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6021@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6022the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6023@end table
6024
6025@ifclear GENERIC
6026@lowersections
6027@end ifclear
6028@end ifset
6029
36f63dca 6030@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6031@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6032@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6033@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6034@node Renesas
6035@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6036
c2dcd04e
NC
6037@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6038H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6039options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6040@end ifset
6041@end ifclear
6042
6043@ifset I960
6044@ifclear GENERIC
6045@raisesections
6046@end ifclear
6047
6048@node i960
6049@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6050
6051@cindex i960 support
6052
6053You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6054specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6055family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6056incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6057linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6058libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6059search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6060
6061For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6062well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6063paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6064the names
6065
6066@smallexample
6067@group
6068try
6069libtry.a
6070tryca
6071libtryca.a
6072@end group
6073@end smallexample
6074
6075@noindent
6076The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6077two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6078
6079You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6080the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6081use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6082specifies a library.
6083
6084@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6085@cindex relaxing on i960
6086@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6087you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6088@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6089them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6090instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6091instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6092target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6093not itself call any subroutines).
6094
48229727
JB
6095@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6096@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6097@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6098The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6099
6100The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6101
85fdf906
AH
6102@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6103@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6104The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6105
36f63dca
NC
6106@ifclear GENERIC
6107@lowersections
6108@end ifclear
6109@end ifset
6110
6111@ifset ARM
6112@ifclear GENERIC
6113@raisesections
6114@end ifclear
6115
93fd0973
SC
6116@ifset M68HC11
6117@ifclear GENERIC
6118@raisesections
6119@end ifclear
6120
6121@node M68HC11/68HC12
6122@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6123
6124@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6125
6126@subsection Linker Relaxation
6127
6128For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6129optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6130
6131@table @emph
6132@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6133@item relaxing address modes
6134@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6135targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6136program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6137respectively.
6138
6139@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6140transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6141page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6142
6143@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6144When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6145of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6146addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6147@code{bset} instructions.
6148
6149@end table
6150
6151@subsection Trampoline Generation
6152
6153@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6154@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6155For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6156call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6157will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6158trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6159case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6160point to the function trampoline.
6161
6162@ifclear GENERIC
6163@lowersections
6164@end ifclear
6165@end ifset
6166
36f63dca 6167@node ARM
3674e28a 6168@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6169
6170@cindex ARM interworking support
6171@kindex --support-old-code
6172For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6173between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6174been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6175line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6176libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6177option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6178given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6179which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6180the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6181non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6182
6183@cindex thumb entry point
6184@cindex entry point, thumb
6185@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6186The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6187@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6188But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6189branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6190executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6191
ce11ba6c
KT
6192@cindex PE import table prefixing
6193@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6194The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6195the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6196elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6197import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6198
e489d0ae
PB
6199@cindex BE8
6200@kindex --be8
6201The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6202executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6203The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6204
3674e28a
PB
6205@cindex TARGET1
6206@kindex --target1-rel
6207@kindex --target1-abs
6208The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6209@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6210or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6211and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6212
6213@cindex TARGET2
6214@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6215The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6216@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6217meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6218@table @samp
6219@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6220@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6221@item abs
6222@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6223@item got-rel
6224@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6225@end table
6226
319850b4
JB
6227@cindex FIX_V4BX
6228@kindex --fix-v4bx
6229The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6230specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6231interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6232also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6233
6234In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6235linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6236@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6237
6238In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6239relocations are ignored.
6240
845b51d6
PB
6241@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6242@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6243Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6244relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6245
6246@smallexample
6247TST rM, #1
6248MOVEQ PC, rM
6249BX Rn
6250@end smallexample
6251
6252This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6253and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6254condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6255
33bfe774
JB
6256@cindex USE_BLX
6257@kindex --use-blx
6258The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6259BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6260situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6261code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6262each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6263
6264This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6265specify it if you are using that target.
6266
c6dd86c6
JB
6267@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6268@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6269The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6270bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6271instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6272to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6273the support code can read the intended values.
6274
6275The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6276intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6277and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6278intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6279full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6280you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6281
6282If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6283enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6284@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6285mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6286vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6287@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6288
6289If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6290potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6291such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6292first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6293instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6294the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6295are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6296
bf21ed78
MS
6297@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6298@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6299The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6300warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6301enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6302linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6303using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6304not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6305
6306@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6307@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6308The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6309warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6310@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6311linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6312using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6313
726150b7
NC
6314@cindex PIC_VENEER
6315@kindex --pic-veneer
6316The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6317ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6318is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6319@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6320
6321@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6322@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6323The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6324code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6325perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6326placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6327controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6328The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6329duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6330group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6331code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6332where they should be placed.
6333
6334The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6335@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6336placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6337branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6338placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6339value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6340exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6341A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6342linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6343from the input sections.
6344
6345The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6346@samp{N = +1}.
6347
1a51c1a4
NC
6348Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6349only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6350otherwise.
6351
36f63dca
NC
6352@ifclear GENERIC
6353@lowersections
6354@end ifclear
6355@end ifset
6356
6357@ifset HPPA
6358@ifclear GENERIC
6359@raisesections
6360@end ifclear
6361
6362@node HPPA ELF32
6363@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6364@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6365@kindex --multi-subspace
6366When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6367import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6368The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6369stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6370multiple sub-spaces.
6371
6372@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6373@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6374Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6375stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6376@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6377sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6378a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6379the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6380conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6381prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6382A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6383branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6384@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6385@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6386detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6387positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6388
6389Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6390single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6391create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6392large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6393
6394@ifclear GENERIC
6395@lowersections
6396@end ifclear
6397@end ifset
6398
7fb9f789
NC
6399@ifset M68K
6400@ifclear GENERIC
6401@raisesections
6402@end ifclear
6403
6404@node M68K
6405@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6406
6407@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6408@kindex --got=@var{type}
6409The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6410The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6411@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6412the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6413@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6414entries only at non-negative offsets.
6415@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6416entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6417support such GOTs.
6418@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6419output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6420file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6421files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6422
6423@ifclear GENERIC
6424@lowersections
6425@end ifclear
6426@end ifset
6427
36f63dca
NC
6428@ifset MMIX
6429@ifclear GENERIC
6430@raisesections
6431@end ifclear
6432
6433@node MMIX
6434@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6435For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6436@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6437understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6438can translate between the two formats.
6439
6440There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6441Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6442registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6443equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6444@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6445global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6446this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6447symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6448
7a2de473
HPN
6449Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6450@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6451The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6452of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6453
6454Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6455are left out from an mmo file.
6456
6457@ifclear GENERIC
6458@lowersections
6459@end ifclear
6460@end ifset
6461
6462@ifset MSP430
6463@ifclear GENERIC
6464@raisesections
6465@end ifclear
6466
6467@node MSP430
6468@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6469For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6470will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6471just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6472
6473@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6474The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6475
6476@table @code
6477@item @samp{.vectors}
6478Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6479
6480@item @samp{.bootloader}
6481Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6482in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6483
6484@item @samp{.infomem}
6485Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6486this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6487
c0065db7 6488@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6489This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6490in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6491
6492@item @samp{.noinit}
6493Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6494
c0065db7 6495The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6496@end table
6497
6498@ifclear GENERIC
6499@lowersections
6500@end ifclear
6501@end ifset
6502
2a60a7a8
AM
6503@ifset POWERPC
6504@ifclear GENERIC
6505@raisesections
6506@end ifclear
6507
6508@node PowerPC ELF32
6509@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6510@cindex PowerPC long branches
6511@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6512Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6513displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6514@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6515@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6516the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6517section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6518section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6519@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6520both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6521considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6522
6523@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6524@table @option
6525@cindex PowerPC PLT
6526@kindex --bss-plt
6527@item --bss-plt
6528Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6529generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6530the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6531writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6532@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6533PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6534compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6535BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6536
016687f8
AM
6537@kindex --secure-plt
6538@item --secure-plt
6539@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6540@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6541when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6542layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6543style BSS PLT.
6544
2a60a7a8
AM
6545@cindex PowerPC GOT
6546@kindex --sdata-got
6547@item --sdata-got
6548The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6549sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6550@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6551section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6552@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6553@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6554@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6555@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6556PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6557pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6558GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6559really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6560
6561@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6562@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6563@item --emit-stub-syms
6564This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6565symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6566
6567@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6568@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6569@item --no-tls-optimize
6570PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6571sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6572disable the optimization.
6573@end table
6574
6575@ifclear GENERIC
6576@lowersections
6577@end ifclear
6578@end ifset
6579
6580@ifset POWERPC64
6581@ifclear GENERIC
6582@raisesections
6583@end ifclear
6584
6585@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6586@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6587
6588@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6589@table @option
6590@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6591@kindex --stub-group-size
6592@item --stub-group-size
6593Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6594by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6595@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6596sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6597a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6598the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6599conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6600prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6601A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6602branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6603@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6604@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6605detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6606positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6607
6608Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6609single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6610create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6611large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6612
6613@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6614@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6615@item --emit-stub-syms
6616This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6617symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6618
6619@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6620@kindex --dotsyms
6621@kindex --no-dotsyms
6622@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6623These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6624in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6625function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6626code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6627properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6628to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6629@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6630dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6631feature.
6632
6633@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6634@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6635@item --no-tls-optimize
6636PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6637sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6638disable the optimization.
6639
6640@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6641@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6642@item --no-opd-optimize
6643PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6644corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6645the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6646Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6647
6648@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6649@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6650@item --non-overlapping-opd
6651Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6652@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6653the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6654entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6655
6656@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6657@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6658@item --no-toc-optimize
6659PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6660entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6661reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6662marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6663marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6664relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6665unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6666reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6667discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6668reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6669code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6670optimization.
6671
6672@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6673@kindex --no-multi-toc
6674@item --no-multi-toc
6675By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6676entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6677total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6678grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6679TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6680calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6681help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
668264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6683Use this option to turn off this feature.
6684@end table
6685
6686@ifclear GENERIC
6687@lowersections
6688@end ifclear
6689@end ifset
6690
49fa1e15
AM
6691@ifset SPU
6692@ifclear GENERIC
6693@raisesections
6694@end ifclear
6695
6696@node SPU ELF
6697@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6698
6699@cindex SPU ELF options
6700@table @option
6701
6702@cindex SPU plugins
6703@kindex --plugin
6704@item --plugin
6705This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6706
6707@cindex SPU overlays
6708@kindex --no-overlays
6709@item --no-overlays
6710Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6711regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6712@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6713turns off all this special overlay handling.
6714
6715@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6716@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6717@item --emit-stub-syms
6718This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6719symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6720
6721@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6722@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6723@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6724This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6725function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6726on calls to non-overlay regions.
6727
6728@cindex SPU local store size
6729@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6730@item --local-store=lo:hi
6731@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6732the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6733range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6734
c0065db7 6735@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6736@kindex --stack-analysis
6737@item --stack-analysis
6738SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6739unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6740under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6741@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6742@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6743determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6744for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6745for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6746for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6747find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6748and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6749under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6750dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6751is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6752and calls will be given.
6753
c0065db7 6754@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6755@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6756@item --emit-stack-syms
6757This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6758in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6759These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6760functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6761functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6762such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6763The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6764@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6765@end table
6766
6767@ifclear GENERIC
6768@lowersections
6769@end ifclear
6770@end ifset
6771
36f63dca
NC
6772@ifset TICOFF
6773@ifclear GENERIC
6774@raisesections
6775@end ifclear
6776
6777@node TI COFF
6778@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6779@cindex TI COFF versions
6780@kindex --format=@var{version}
6781The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6782TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6783also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6784format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6785header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6786
6787@ifclear GENERIC
6788@lowersections
6789@end ifclear
6790@end ifset
6791
2ca22b03
NC
6792@ifset WIN32
6793@ifclear GENERIC
6794@raisesections
6795@end ifclear
6796
6797@node WIN32
6798@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6799
c0065db7 6800This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6801See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6802command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6803
6804@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6805@cindex import libraries
6806@item import libraries
69da35b5 6807The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6808libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6809regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6810archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6811support for creating such libraries provided with the
6812@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6813
c0065db7
RM
6814@item exporting DLL symbols
6815@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6816The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6817
6818@table @emph
6819@item using auto-export functionality
6820@cindex using auto-export functionality
6821By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6822which is controlled by the following command line options:
6823
0a5d968e
NC
6824@itemize
6825@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6826@item --exclude-symbols
6827@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6828@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6829@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6830@end itemize
6831
09e2aba4
DK
6832When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6833(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6834symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6835often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6836private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6837options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6838exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6839final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6840
6841If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6842command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6843if either of the following are true:
6844
6845@itemize
6846@item A DEF file is used.
6847@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6848@end itemize
dc8465bf 6849
c0065db7
RM
6850@item using a DEF file
6851@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6852Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6853an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6854exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6855name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6856command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6857
6858@example
6859gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6860@end example
6861
0a5d968e
NC
6862Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6863@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6864
dc8465bf
NC
6865Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6866
6867@example
4b5bd4e7 6868LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6869
6870EXPORTS
6871foo
6872bar
6873_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6874another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6875var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6876doo = foo == foo2
6877eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6878@end example
dc8465bf 6879
7fcab871 6880This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6881symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6882alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6883by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6884@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6885@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6886export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6887in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6888symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6889
6b31ad16
DS
6890The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6891name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6892the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6893
b45619c0
NC
6894When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6895library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6896@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6897executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6898
6899With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6900specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6901non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6902
6903If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6904or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6905filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6906
4b5bd4e7
DS
6907The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6908
6909@example
6910EXPORTS
6911 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6912 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6913 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6914@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6915
6916Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6917@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6918@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6919@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6920Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6921@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6922string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6923
6924The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6925
6926@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6927will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6928by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6929linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6930library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6931
6932@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6933The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6934the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6935@code{*_imp__foo}).
6936
6937@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6938well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6939read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6940variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6941the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6942extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6943application will behave unexpectedly.
6944
6945@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6946it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6947symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6948API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6949the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6950
4b5bd4e7
DS
6951See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6952other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6953
6954@cindex creating a DEF file
6955While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6956with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6957
6958@item Using decorations
6959@cindex Using decorations
6960Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6961itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6962declared as:
6963
6964@example
6965__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6966__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6967@end example
6968
6969All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6970any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6971this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6972the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6973
6974Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6975decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6976instead:
6977
6978@example
6979__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6980__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6981@end example
6982
c0065db7
RM
6983This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6984when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6985variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6986code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6987of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6988omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6989@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6990information.
c0065db7 6991@end table
dc8465bf 6992
2ca22b03
NC
6993@cindex automatic data imports
6994@item automatic data imports
6995The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6996by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6997compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6998issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6999code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7000c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7001initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7002decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7003platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7004command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7005The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7006suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7007trigger the feature's use.
7008
c0065db7 7009auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7010additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7011
c0065db7 7012"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7013documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7014
c0065db7
RM
7015The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7016occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7017One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7018below.
7019
7020@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7021For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7022object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7023offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7024field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7025in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7026without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7027The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7028references.
7029
c0065db7
RM
7030The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7031be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7032themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7033runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7034compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7035support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7036run without error on an older system.
7037
c0065db7
RM
7038@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7039enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7040
7041@cindex direct linking to a dll
7042@item direct linking to a dll
7043The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7044including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7045libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7046traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7047libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7048function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7049though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7050storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7051tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7052large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7053
c0065db7 7054Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7055@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7056of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7057perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7058select the dll instead of an import library.
7059
2ca22b03 7060
69da35b5
NC
7061For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7062to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7063
7064@example
45e948fe
NC
7065libxxx.dll.a
7066xxx.dll.a
7067libxxx.a
7068xxx.lib
69da35b5 7069cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7070libxxx.dll
7071xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7072@end example
7073
69da35b5
NC
7074before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7075
c0065db7
RM
7076(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7077where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7078@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7079file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7080@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7081
c0065db7
RM
7082Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7083@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7084was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7085various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7086could coexist on the same machine.
7087
2ca22b03
NC
7088The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7089applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7090libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7091
7092@example
7093bin/
7094 cygxxx.dll
7095lib/
7096 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7097 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7098@end example
7099
c0065db7
RM
7100Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7101done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7102
71031. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7104@example
7105gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7106@end example
2ca22b03 7107
69da35b5
NC
7108However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7109(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7110@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7111not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7112
2ca22b03
NC
71132. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7114directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7115should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7116making the app/dll.
7117
7118@example
7119ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7120@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7121
7122Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7123
7124@example
7125gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7126@end example
69da35b5
NC
7127
7128This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7129perfectly legal
7130
7131@example
7132bin/
7133 cygxxx-5.dll
7134lib/
c0065db7 7135 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7136@end example
7137
dc8465bf 7138Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7139even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7140@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7141
7142Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7143wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7144
71451. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7146work with auto-imported data.
7147
dc8465bf
NC
71482. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7149import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7150symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7151for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7152possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7153
45e948fe
NC
71543. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7155critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7156in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7157stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7158
69da35b5 7159So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7160true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7161a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7162binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7163massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7164requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7165will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7166
c0065db7 7167@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7168@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7169@item adding additional names
7170Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7171A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7172exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7173when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7174import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7175
c0065db7 7176@example
dc8465bf
NC
7177LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7178
7179EXPORTS
c0065db7 7180foo
dc8465bf 7181_foo = foo
c0065db7 7182@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7183
7184The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7185
7186Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7187source code using the "weak" attribute:
7188
c0065db7
RM
7189@example
7190void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7191void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7192@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7193
7194See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7195symbols.
7196
7197@item renaming symbols
7198Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7199kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7200@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7201DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7202created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7203
c0065db7 7204@example
dc8465bf
NC
7205LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7206
7207EXPORTS
7208_foo = foo
c0065db7 7209@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7210
7211The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7212@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7213@end table
dc8465bf 7214
0a5d968e 7215Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7216unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7217If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7218@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7219that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7220@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7221renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7222to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7223the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7224In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7225which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7226
7227@cindex weak externals
7228@item weak externals
7229The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7230weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7231defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7232are three variants of weak externals:
7233@itemize
7234@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7235called lazy externals.
7236@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7237This form is not presently implemented.
7238@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7239implemented.
7240@end itemize
7241As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7242are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7243uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7244
7245@cindex aligned common symbols
7246@item aligned common symbols
7247As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7248desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7249the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7250carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7251by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7252tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7253but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7254warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7255@end table
7256
7257@ifclear GENERIC
7258@lowersections
7259@end ifclear
7260@end ifset
7261
e0001a05
NC
7262@ifset XTENSA
7263@ifclear GENERIC
7264@raisesections
7265@end ifclear
7266
7267@node Xtensa
7268@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7269
7270@cindex Xtensa processors
7271The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7272@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7273specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7274keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7275example, with the command:
7276
7277@smallexample
7278SECTIONS
7279@{
7280 .text : @{
7281 *(.literal .text)
7282 @}
7283@}
7284@end smallexample
7285
7286@noindent
7287@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7288and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7289literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7290interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7291group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7292files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7293and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7294
43cd72b9 7295@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7296@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7297Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7298provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7299is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7300literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7301will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7302location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7303the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7304unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7305@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7306range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7307
7308For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7309to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7310instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7311instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7312instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7313@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7314hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7315By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7316switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7317density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7318instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7319performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7320linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7321a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7322
7323The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7324control the linker:
7325
7326@cindex Xtensa options
7327@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7328@item --size-opt
7329When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7330more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7331no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7332alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7333preserve the correctness of the code.
7334@end table
e0001a05
NC
7335
7336@ifclear GENERIC
7337@lowersections
7338@end ifclear
7339@end ifset
7340
252b5132
RH
7341@ifclear SingleFormat
7342@node BFD
7343@chapter BFD
7344
7345@cindex back end
7346@cindex object file management
7347@cindex object formats available
7348@kindex objdump -i
7349The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7350These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7351object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7352format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7353it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7354associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7355object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7356(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7357list all the formats available for your configuration.
7358
7359@cindex BFD requirements
7360@cindex requirements for BFD
7361As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7362several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7363BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7364formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7365been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7366BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7367may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7368
7369One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7370mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7371useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7372conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7373
7374@menu
7375* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7376@end menu
7377
7378@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7379@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7380@cindex opening object files
7381@include bfdsumm.texi
7382@end ifclear
7383
7384@node Reporting Bugs
7385@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7386@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7387@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7388
ff5dcc92 7389Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7390
7391Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7392it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7393to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7394work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7395@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7396
7397In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7398information that enables us to fix the bug.
7399
7400@menu
7401* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7402* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7403@end menu
7404
7405@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7406@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7407@cindex bug criteria
7408
7409If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7410
7411@itemize @bullet
7412@cindex fatal signal
7413@cindex linker crash
7414@cindex crash of linker
7415@item
7416If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7417@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7418
7419@cindex error on valid input
7420@item
ff5dcc92 7421If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7422
7423@cindex invalid input
7424@item
ff5dcc92 7425If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7426may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7427object files are correct.
7428
7429@item
7430If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7431improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7432@end itemize
7433
7434@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7435@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7436@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7437@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7438
7439A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7440products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7441recommend you contact that organization first.
7442
7443You can find contact information for many support companies and
7444individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7445distribution.
7446
ad22bfe8 7447@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7448Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7449@value{BUGURL}.
7450@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7451
7452The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7453@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7454fact or leave it out, state it!
7455
7456Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7457problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7458assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7459matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7460the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7461location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7462were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7463into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7464specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7465and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7466
7467Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7468the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7469on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7470
7471Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7472bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7473respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7474You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7475
7476To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7477
7478@itemize @bullet
7479@item
ff5dcc92 7480The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7481the @samp{--version} argument.
7482
7483Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7484the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7485
7486@item
ff5dcc92 7487Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7488patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7489
7490@item
7491The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7492version number.
7493
7494@item
ff5dcc92 7495What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7496``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7497
7498@item
7499The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7500observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7501list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7502sufficient.
7503
7504If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7505and then we might not encounter the bug.
7506
7507@item
7508A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7509bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7510provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7511bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7512state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7513requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7514we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7515attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7516
7517If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7518@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7519object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7520@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7521how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7522
7523@item
7524A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7525incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7526
ff5dcc92 7527Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7528will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7529not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7530a chance to make a mistake.
7531
7532Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7533say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7534copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7535C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7536and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7537fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7538you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7539any conclusion from our observations.
7540
7541@item
ff5dcc92 7542If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7543diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7544@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7545If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7546context, not by line number.
7547
7548The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7549sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7550@end itemize
7551
7552Here are some things that are not necessary:
7553
7554@itemize @bullet
7555@item
7556A description of the envelope of the bug.
7557
7558Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7559which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7560changes will not affect it.
7561
7562This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7563will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7564with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7565We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7566
7567Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7568of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7569output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7570less time, and so on.
7571
7572However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7573report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7574
7575@item
7576A patch for the bug.
7577
7578A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7579the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7580a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7581to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7582
ff5dcc92 7583Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7584construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7585through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7586able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7587fixed.
7588
7589And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7590patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7591help us to understand.
7592
7593@item
7594A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7595
7596Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7597things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7598@end itemize
7599
7600@node MRI
7601@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7602@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7603To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7604linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7605alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7606described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7607simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7608@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7609linker commands; these commands are described here.
7610
7611In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7612file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7613features to make use of them.
7614
7615You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7616@samp{-c} command-line option.
7617
7618Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7619command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7620blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7621MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7622issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7623
7624Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7625
7626You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7627lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7628The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7629
7630@table @code
7631@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7632@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7633@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7634Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7635the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7636@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7637your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7638script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7639commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7640input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7641@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7642
7643@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7644@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7645Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7646in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7647
7648@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7649
7650@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7651@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7652Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7653@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7654
7655@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7656@item BASE @var{expression}
7657Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7658absolute addresses) in the output file.
7659
7660@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7661@item CHIP @var{expression}
7662@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7663This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7664
7665@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7666@item END
7667This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7668
7669@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7670@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7671Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7672language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7673
7674@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7675@item
252b5132
RH
7676S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7677
7678@item
7679IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7680
7681@item
7682COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7683@samp{COFF}
7684@end enumerate
7685
7686@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7687@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7688Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7689@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7690
7691The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7692same line, with no change in its effect.
7693
7694@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7695@item LOAD @var{filename}
7696@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7697Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7698same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7699command line.
7700
7701@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7702@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7703@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7704MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7705option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7706
7707@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7708@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7709@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7710Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7711order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7712script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7713sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7714file, in the order specified.
7715
7716@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7717@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7718@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7719@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7720Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7721@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7722
7723@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7724@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7725@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7726@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7727You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7728specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7729If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7730@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7731@end table
7732
793c5807
NC
7733@node GNU Free Documentation License
7734@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7735@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7736
370b66a1
CD
7737@node LD Index
7738@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7739
7740@printindex cp
7741
7742@tex
7743% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7744% meantime:
7745\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7746\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7747\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7748\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7749\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7750\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7751\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7752\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7753\page\colophon
7754% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7755@end tex
7756
252b5132 7757@bye
This page took 1.737137 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.